armorstart® dlr reference architecture - literature...

68
ArmorStart® DLR Reference Architecture Application Guide

Upload: phungtuyen

Post on 20-Mar-2018

253 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

ArmorStartreg DLR Reference Architecture

Application Guide

Important User Information

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards

The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication

Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature) describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence

SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

General Precautions

In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual the following statements which are general to the system must be read and understood

ATTENTION This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing these devices The user must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology configuration procedures required equipment and safety precautions

WARNING The National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA79 and any other governing regional or local code will overrule the information in this manual Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the ArmorStart LT or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

ATTENTION The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing the assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures refer to Publication 8000-452 Guarding against Electrostatic Discharge or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks

ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 3

Software Requirements

This table lists the versions of software that are required

Additional Resources

These documents and websites contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products

You can view or download publications at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative

Table 1 - Rockwell Automation Industrial Network Resources

Software Version

RSLinx Classic 256 or later

RSLogix 5000 1701 or laterDownload the most current version of the Add-On Profile fromhttpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportdownloadshtml

BOOTPDHCP Version 23 or later

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworks Rockwell Automation networks and communication website

httpwwwabcomnetworksethernet Rockwell Automation EtherNetIP website

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomservicesnetworkshttpwwwrockwellautomationcomservicessecurity

Rockwell Automation network and security services websites

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Education series webcasts for IT and controls professionals

EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET-AP005 Describes how to install configure and maintain linear and Device-level Ring (DLR) networks using Rockwell Automation EtherNetIP devices with embedded switch technology

EtherNetIP Network Configuration User Manual Publication ENET-UM001 Describes how to configure and use EtherNetIP communication modules with a Logix5000 controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network

EtherNet Design Consideration Publication ENET-RM002 Provides details on ethernet design and infrastructure

EtherNetIP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual Publication ENET-UM001 Provides details about how to configure your module

EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET-AP005 Provides information about using products with embedded switch technology to construct networks with linear and ring topologies

EtherNetIP Industrial Protocol White Paper Publication ENET-WP001 Describes how to implement services and data objects on a TCPUDPIP based Ethernet network

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1770-41 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system

Wiring and Grounding Guidelines (PWM) AC Drives Publication DRIVES-IN001 Describes wiring and grounding guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

Product Certifications websitehttpwwwrockwellautomationcomproductscertification

Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table 3 - Product Selection Resources

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation contact Customer Support

Table 2 - ODVA Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwodvaorg Open DeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA) website

httpwwwodvaorgdefaultaspxtabid=54 The CIP Advantage websitebull CIP features and benefits bull How to get started

Ethernet Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manualpdf

Describes the required media components and how to plan for install verify troubleshoot and certify an Ethernet network

Network Infrastructure for EtherNetIP Introduction and Considerations ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guidepdf

Provides an overview of the technologies used in EtherNetIP networks and provides guidelines for deploying infrastructure devices in EtherNetIP networks

Resource Description

Industrial Controls catalog website httpwwwabcomcatalogs

Industrial Controls catalog website

ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Selection Guide Publication 290-SG001 Product selection guide

Table 4 - Cisco and Rockwell Automation Alliance Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems reference architecture website

Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide Publication ENET-TD001

Represents a collaborative development effort from Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems The design guide is built on and adds to design guidelines from the Cisco Ethernet-to-the-Factory (EttF) solution and the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture The design guide focuses on the manufacturing industry

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada

Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 5

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number listed earlier to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

Important Information 2General Precautions 3Software Requirements 4Additional Resources 4Rockwell Automation Support 5Installation Assistance 5New Product Satisfaction Return 6

Chapter 1Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Introduction 9

ArmorStart EtherNet IP Overview 9What is a DLR Network 10DLR Network Elements 10DLR Network Operation 12Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13DLR Network Fault Management 14

Chapter 2Construct and Configure a Device-Level Ring (DLR) Network

Introduction 15EtherNet Capacity Tool 15Install Devices on a DLR Network 16Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software 21Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33Verify Supervisor Configuration 34IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 7

Table of Contents

Chapter 3Monitor a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 37Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37Monitor Status Pages 39How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server 44Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Chapter 4Troubleshoot a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 53General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 53Duplicate IP Address Detection 54Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55Network Recovery Performance 58Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Appendix ANetwork Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations 61

Appendix BRequired Firmware Revisions Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile 65

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software 66

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Important User Information

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards

The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication

Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature) describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence

SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

General Precautions

In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual the following statements which are general to the system must be read and understood

ATTENTION This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing these devices The user must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology configuration procedures required equipment and safety precautions

WARNING The National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA79 and any other governing regional or local code will overrule the information in this manual Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the ArmorStart LT or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

ATTENTION The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing the assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures refer to Publication 8000-452 Guarding against Electrostatic Discharge or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks

ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 3

Software Requirements

This table lists the versions of software that are required

Additional Resources

These documents and websites contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products

You can view or download publications at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative

Table 1 - Rockwell Automation Industrial Network Resources

Software Version

RSLinx Classic 256 or later

RSLogix 5000 1701 or laterDownload the most current version of the Add-On Profile fromhttpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportdownloadshtml

BOOTPDHCP Version 23 or later

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworks Rockwell Automation networks and communication website

httpwwwabcomnetworksethernet Rockwell Automation EtherNetIP website

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomservicesnetworkshttpwwwrockwellautomationcomservicessecurity

Rockwell Automation network and security services websites

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Education series webcasts for IT and controls professionals

EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET-AP005 Describes how to install configure and maintain linear and Device-level Ring (DLR) networks using Rockwell Automation EtherNetIP devices with embedded switch technology

EtherNetIP Network Configuration User Manual Publication ENET-UM001 Describes how to configure and use EtherNetIP communication modules with a Logix5000 controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network

EtherNet Design Consideration Publication ENET-RM002 Provides details on ethernet design and infrastructure

EtherNetIP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual Publication ENET-UM001 Provides details about how to configure your module

EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET-AP005 Provides information about using products with embedded switch technology to construct networks with linear and ring topologies

EtherNetIP Industrial Protocol White Paper Publication ENET-WP001 Describes how to implement services and data objects on a TCPUDPIP based Ethernet network

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1770-41 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system

Wiring and Grounding Guidelines (PWM) AC Drives Publication DRIVES-IN001 Describes wiring and grounding guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

Product Certifications websitehttpwwwrockwellautomationcomproductscertification

Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table 3 - Product Selection Resources

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation contact Customer Support

Table 2 - ODVA Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwodvaorg Open DeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA) website

httpwwwodvaorgdefaultaspxtabid=54 The CIP Advantage websitebull CIP features and benefits bull How to get started

Ethernet Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manualpdf

Describes the required media components and how to plan for install verify troubleshoot and certify an Ethernet network

Network Infrastructure for EtherNetIP Introduction and Considerations ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guidepdf

Provides an overview of the technologies used in EtherNetIP networks and provides guidelines for deploying infrastructure devices in EtherNetIP networks

Resource Description

Industrial Controls catalog website httpwwwabcomcatalogs

Industrial Controls catalog website

ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Selection Guide Publication 290-SG001 Product selection guide

Table 4 - Cisco and Rockwell Automation Alliance Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems reference architecture website

Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide Publication ENET-TD001

Represents a collaborative development effort from Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems The design guide is built on and adds to design guidelines from the Cisco Ethernet-to-the-Factory (EttF) solution and the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture The design guide focuses on the manufacturing industry

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada

Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 5

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number listed earlier to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

Important Information 2General Precautions 3Software Requirements 4Additional Resources 4Rockwell Automation Support 5Installation Assistance 5New Product Satisfaction Return 6

Chapter 1Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Introduction 9

ArmorStart EtherNet IP Overview 9What is a DLR Network 10DLR Network Elements 10DLR Network Operation 12Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13DLR Network Fault Management 14

Chapter 2Construct and Configure a Device-Level Ring (DLR) Network

Introduction 15EtherNet Capacity Tool 15Install Devices on a DLR Network 16Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software 21Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33Verify Supervisor Configuration 34IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 7

Table of Contents

Chapter 3Monitor a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 37Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37Monitor Status Pages 39How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server 44Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Chapter 4Troubleshoot a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 53General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 53Duplicate IP Address Detection 54Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55Network Recovery Performance 58Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Appendix ANetwork Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations 61

Appendix BRequired Firmware Revisions Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile 65

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software 66

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

General Precautions

In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual the following statements which are general to the system must be read and understood

ATTENTION This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing these devices The user must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology configuration procedures required equipment and safety precautions

WARNING The National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA79 and any other governing regional or local code will overrule the information in this manual Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the ArmorStart LT or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury andor equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation

ATTENTION The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing the assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures refer to Publication 8000-452 Guarding against Electrostatic Discharge or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks

ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 3

Software Requirements

This table lists the versions of software that are required

Additional Resources

These documents and websites contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products

You can view or download publications at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative

Table 1 - Rockwell Automation Industrial Network Resources

Software Version

RSLinx Classic 256 or later

RSLogix 5000 1701 or laterDownload the most current version of the Add-On Profile fromhttpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportdownloadshtml

BOOTPDHCP Version 23 or later

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworks Rockwell Automation networks and communication website

httpwwwabcomnetworksethernet Rockwell Automation EtherNetIP website

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomservicesnetworkshttpwwwrockwellautomationcomservicessecurity

Rockwell Automation network and security services websites

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Education series webcasts for IT and controls professionals

EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET-AP005 Describes how to install configure and maintain linear and Device-level Ring (DLR) networks using Rockwell Automation EtherNetIP devices with embedded switch technology

EtherNetIP Network Configuration User Manual Publication ENET-UM001 Describes how to configure and use EtherNetIP communication modules with a Logix5000 controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network

EtherNet Design Consideration Publication ENET-RM002 Provides details on ethernet design and infrastructure

EtherNetIP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual Publication ENET-UM001 Provides details about how to configure your module

EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET-AP005 Provides information about using products with embedded switch technology to construct networks with linear and ring topologies

EtherNetIP Industrial Protocol White Paper Publication ENET-WP001 Describes how to implement services and data objects on a TCPUDPIP based Ethernet network

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1770-41 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system

Wiring and Grounding Guidelines (PWM) AC Drives Publication DRIVES-IN001 Describes wiring and grounding guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

Product Certifications websitehttpwwwrockwellautomationcomproductscertification

Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table 3 - Product Selection Resources

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation contact Customer Support

Table 2 - ODVA Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwodvaorg Open DeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA) website

httpwwwodvaorgdefaultaspxtabid=54 The CIP Advantage websitebull CIP features and benefits bull How to get started

Ethernet Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manualpdf

Describes the required media components and how to plan for install verify troubleshoot and certify an Ethernet network

Network Infrastructure for EtherNetIP Introduction and Considerations ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guidepdf

Provides an overview of the technologies used in EtherNetIP networks and provides guidelines for deploying infrastructure devices in EtherNetIP networks

Resource Description

Industrial Controls catalog website httpwwwabcomcatalogs

Industrial Controls catalog website

ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Selection Guide Publication 290-SG001 Product selection guide

Table 4 - Cisco and Rockwell Automation Alliance Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems reference architecture website

Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide Publication ENET-TD001

Represents a collaborative development effort from Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems The design guide is built on and adds to design guidelines from the Cisco Ethernet-to-the-Factory (EttF) solution and the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture The design guide focuses on the manufacturing industry

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada

Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 5

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number listed earlier to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

Important Information 2General Precautions 3Software Requirements 4Additional Resources 4Rockwell Automation Support 5Installation Assistance 5New Product Satisfaction Return 6

Chapter 1Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Introduction 9

ArmorStart EtherNet IP Overview 9What is a DLR Network 10DLR Network Elements 10DLR Network Operation 12Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13DLR Network Fault Management 14

Chapter 2Construct and Configure a Device-Level Ring (DLR) Network

Introduction 15EtherNet Capacity Tool 15Install Devices on a DLR Network 16Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software 21Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33Verify Supervisor Configuration 34IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 7

Table of Contents

Chapter 3Monitor a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 37Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37Monitor Status Pages 39How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server 44Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Chapter 4Troubleshoot a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 53General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 53Duplicate IP Address Detection 54Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55Network Recovery Performance 58Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Appendix ANetwork Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations 61

Appendix BRequired Firmware Revisions Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile 65

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software 66

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO ltFEFF004b00e40079007400e40020006e00e40069007400e4002000610073006500740075006b007300690061002c0020006b0075006e0020006c0075006f0074002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400740065006a00610020006c0061006100640075006b006100730074006100200074007900f6007000f60079007400e400740075006c006f0073007400750073007400610020006a00610020007600650064006f007300740075007300740061002000760061007200740065006e002e00200020004c0075006f0064007500740020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740069007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f0062006100740069006c006c00610020006a0061002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030003a006c006c00610020006a006100200075007500640065006d006d0069006c006c0061002egt SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Software Requirements

This table lists the versions of software that are required

Additional Resources

These documents and websites contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products

You can view or download publications at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative

Table 1 - Rockwell Automation Industrial Network Resources

Software Version

RSLinx Classic 256 or later

RSLogix 5000 1701 or laterDownload the most current version of the Add-On Profile fromhttpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportdownloadshtml

BOOTPDHCP Version 23 or later

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworks Rockwell Automation networks and communication website

httpwwwabcomnetworksethernet Rockwell Automation EtherNetIP website

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomservicesnetworkshttpwwwrockwellautomationcomservicessecurity

Rockwell Automation network and security services websites

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Education series webcasts for IT and controls professionals

EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET-AP005 Describes how to install configure and maintain linear and Device-level Ring (DLR) networks using Rockwell Automation EtherNetIP devices with embedded switch technology

EtherNetIP Network Configuration User Manual Publication ENET-UM001 Describes how to configure and use EtherNetIP communication modules with a Logix5000 controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network

EtherNet Design Consideration Publication ENET-RM002 Provides details on ethernet design and infrastructure

EtherNetIP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual Publication ENET-UM001 Provides details about how to configure your module

EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET-AP005 Provides information about using products with embedded switch technology to construct networks with linear and ring topologies

EtherNetIP Industrial Protocol White Paper Publication ENET-WP001 Describes how to implement services and data objects on a TCPUDPIP based Ethernet network

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1770-41 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system

Wiring and Grounding Guidelines (PWM) AC Drives Publication DRIVES-IN001 Describes wiring and grounding guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives

Product Certifications websitehttpwwwrockwellautomationcomproductscertification

Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table 3 - Product Selection Resources

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation contact Customer Support

Table 2 - ODVA Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwodvaorg Open DeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA) website

httpwwwodvaorgdefaultaspxtabid=54 The CIP Advantage websitebull CIP features and benefits bull How to get started

Ethernet Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manualpdf

Describes the required media components and how to plan for install verify troubleshoot and certify an Ethernet network

Network Infrastructure for EtherNetIP Introduction and Considerations ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guidepdf

Provides an overview of the technologies used in EtherNetIP networks and provides guidelines for deploying infrastructure devices in EtherNetIP networks

Resource Description

Industrial Controls catalog website httpwwwabcomcatalogs

Industrial Controls catalog website

ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Selection Guide Publication 290-SG001 Product selection guide

Table 4 - Cisco and Rockwell Automation Alliance Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems reference architecture website

Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide Publication ENET-TD001

Represents a collaborative development effort from Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems The design guide is built on and adds to design guidelines from the Cisco Ethernet-to-the-Factory (EttF) solution and the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture The design guide focuses on the manufacturing industry

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada

Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 5

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number listed earlier to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

Important Information 2General Precautions 3Software Requirements 4Additional Resources 4Rockwell Automation Support 5Installation Assistance 5New Product Satisfaction Return 6

Chapter 1Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Introduction 9

ArmorStart EtherNet IP Overview 9What is a DLR Network 10DLR Network Elements 10DLR Network Operation 12Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13DLR Network Fault Management 14

Chapter 2Construct and Configure a Device-Level Ring (DLR) Network

Introduction 15EtherNet Capacity Tool 15Install Devices on a DLR Network 16Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software 21Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33Verify Supervisor Configuration 34IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 7

Table of Contents

Chapter 3Monitor a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 37Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37Monitor Status Pages 39How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server 44Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Chapter 4Troubleshoot a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 53General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 53Duplicate IP Address Detection 54Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55Network Recovery Performance 58Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Appendix ANetwork Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations 61

Appendix BRequired Firmware Revisions Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile 65

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software 66

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300730061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f50065007300200064006500200066006f0072006d00610020006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200069006d0070007200650073007300f5006500730020006400650020007100750061006c0069006400610064006500200065006d00200069006d00700072006500730073006f0072006100730020006400650073006b0074006f00700020006500200064006900730070006f00730069007400690076006f0073002000640065002000700072006f00760061002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006900610064006f007300200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002000650020006f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650020007600650072007300f50065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Table 3 - Product Selection Resources

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation contact Customer Support

Table 2 - ODVA Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwodvaorg Open DeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA) website

httpwwwodvaorgdefaultaspxtabid=54 The CIP Advantage websitebull CIP features and benefits bull How to get started

Ethernet Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manualpdf

Describes the required media components and how to plan for install verify troubleshoot and certify an Ethernet network

Network Infrastructure for EtherNetIP Introduction and Considerations ODVA publicationhttpwwwodvaorgPortals0LibraryPublications_NumberedPUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guidepdf

Provides an overview of the technologies used in EtherNetIP networks and provides guidelines for deploying infrastructure devices in EtherNetIP networks

Resource Description

Industrial Controls catalog website httpwwwabcomcatalogs

Industrial Controls catalog website

ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Selection Guide Publication 290-SG001 Product selection guide

Table 4 - Cisco and Rockwell Automation Alliance Resources

Resource Description

httpwwwabcomnetworksarchitectureshtml Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems reference architecture website

Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide Publication ENET-TD001

Represents a collaborative development effort from Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems The design guide is built on and adds to design guidelines from the Cisco Ethernet-to-the-Factory (EttF) solution and the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture The design guide focuses on the manufacturing industry

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada

Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 5

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number listed earlier to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

Important Information 2General Precautions 3Software Requirements 4Additional Resources 4Rockwell Automation Support 5Installation Assistance 5New Product Satisfaction Return 6

Chapter 1Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Introduction 9

ArmorStart EtherNet IP Overview 9What is a DLR Network 10DLR Network Elements 10DLR Network Operation 12Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13DLR Network Fault Management 14

Chapter 2Construct and Configure a Device-Level Ring (DLR) Network

Introduction 15EtherNet Capacity Tool 15Install Devices on a DLR Network 16Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software 21Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33Verify Supervisor Configuration 34IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 7

Table of Contents

Chapter 3Monitor a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 37Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37Monitor Status Pages 39How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server 44Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Chapter 4Troubleshoot a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 53General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 53Duplicate IP Address Detection 54Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55Network Recovery Performance 58Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Appendix ANetwork Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations 61

Appendix BRequired Firmware Revisions Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile 65

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software 66

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f0070007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200066006f00720020007500740073006b00720069006600740020006100760020006800f800790020006b00760061006c00690074006500740020007000e500200062006f007200640073006b0072006900760065007200200065006c006c00650072002000700072006f006f006600650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c00650072002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006500720065002egt PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number listed earlier to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

Important Information 2General Precautions 3Software Requirements 4Additional Resources 4Rockwell Automation Support 5Installation Assistance 5New Product Satisfaction Return 6

Chapter 1Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Introduction 9

ArmorStart EtherNet IP Overview 9What is a DLR Network 10DLR Network Elements 10DLR Network Operation 12Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13DLR Network Fault Management 14

Chapter 2Construct and Configure a Device-Level Ring (DLR) Network

Introduction 15EtherNet Capacity Tool 15Install Devices on a DLR Network 16Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software 21Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33Verify Supervisor Configuration 34IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 7

Table of Contents

Chapter 3Monitor a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 37Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37Monitor Status Pages 39How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server 44Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Chapter 4Troubleshoot a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 53General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 53Duplicate IP Address Detection 54Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55Network Recovery Performance 58Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Appendix ANetwork Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations 61

Appendix BRequired Firmware Revisions Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile 65

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software 66

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP ltFEFF005500740069006c0069006300650020006500730074006100200063006f006e0066006900670075007200610063006900f3006e0020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000640065002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200063006f006e00730065006700750069007200200069006d0070007200650073006900f3006e002000640065002000630061006c006900640061006400200065006e00200069006d0070007200650073006f0072006100730020006400650020006500730063007200690074006f00720069006f00200079002000680065007200720061006d00690065006e00740061007300200064006500200063006f00720072006500630063006900f3006e002e002000530065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006500610064006f007300200063006f006e0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f0070007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200066006f00720020007500740073006b00720069006600740020006100760020006800f800790020006b00760061006c00690074006500740020007000e500200062006f007200640073006b0072006900760065007200200065006c006c00650072002000700072006f006f006600650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c00650072002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006500720065002egt PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300730061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f50065007300200064006500200066006f0072006d00610020006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200069006d0070007200650073007300f5006500730020006400650020007100750061006c0069006400610064006500200065006d00200069006d00700072006500730073006f0072006100730020006400650073006b0074006f00700020006500200064006900730070006f00730069007400690076006f0073002000640065002000700072006f00760061002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006900610064006f007300200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002000650020006f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650020007600650072007300f50065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Table of Contents

Important Information 2General Precautions 3Software Requirements 4Additional Resources 4Rockwell Automation Support 5Installation Assistance 5New Product Satisfaction Return 6

Chapter 1Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Introduction 9

ArmorStart EtherNet IP Overview 9What is a DLR Network 10DLR Network Elements 10DLR Network Operation 12Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13DLR Network Fault Management 14

Chapter 2Construct and Configure a Device-Level Ring (DLR) Network

Introduction 15EtherNet Capacity Tool 15Install Devices on a DLR Network 16Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software 21Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33Verify Supervisor Configuration 34IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 7

Table of Contents

Chapter 3Monitor a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 37Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37Monitor Status Pages 39How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server 44Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Chapter 4Troubleshoot a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 53General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 53Duplicate IP Address Detection 54Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55Network Recovery Performance 58Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Appendix ANetwork Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations 61

Appendix BRequired Firmware Revisions Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile 65

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software 66

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Table of Contents

Chapter 3Monitor a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 37Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37Monitor Status Pages 39How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server 44Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Chapter 4Troubleshoot a Device-level (DLR) Network

Introduction 53General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks 53Duplicate IP Address Detection 54Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55Network Recovery Performance 58Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Appendix ANetwork Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations 61

Appendix BRequired Firmware Revisions Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile 65

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software 66

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200076006f006e002000640065006e0065006e002000530069006500200068006f00630068007700650072007400690067006500200044007200750063006b006500200061007500660020004400650073006b0074006f0070002d0044007200750063006b00650072006e00200075006e0064002000500072006f006f0066002d00470065007200e400740065006e002000650072007a0065007500670065006e0020006d00f60063006800740065006e002e002000450072007300740065006c006c007400650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f00620061007400200075006e0064002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0064006500720020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 1

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

Introduction Prior to the introduction of products with embedded switch technology the traditional EtherNetIP network topology has been a star type End devices are connected and communicate with each other via a switch

The EtherNetIP embedded switch technology offers alternative network topologies for interconnecting EtherNetIP devices It embeds switches into the end devices themselves

ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview

The ArmorStart with EtherNetIP incorporates the advantages of distributed motor control EtherNetIP communication and Embedded Switch Technology The ArmorStart EtherNetIP family includes full voltage or Sensorless Vector Control AC drive motor starters designed for most of your critical applications ArmorStart with EtherNetIP is a simple seamless and cost-effective method of integrating pre-engineered starters IO and network capabilities in your On-Machine architecture The dual port 10100 Mbps embedded Ethernet switch supports Linear and Device Level Ring Topologies in addition to the traditional star topology

Topic Page

Introduction 9

ArmorStart with EtherNet IP Overview 9

What is a DLR Network 10

DLR Network Elements 10

DLR Network Operation 12

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network 13

DLR Network Fault Management 14

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNetIP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnetThese ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets The two ports share one IP Address and MAC Address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 9

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network

A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the interconnection of automation devices This topology is also implemented at the device level No additional switches are required

The graphic below shows an example of an ArmorStart LT Bulletins 291 and 291E and an ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 280E in a DLR network

Figure 1 - Example DLR Network

The advantages of the DLR network include

bull Simple installation

bull Media resiliency to a single point of failure on the network

bull Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network (lt3 ms convergence for up to 50 nodes on ring)

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network when compared to a linear or star network However use of this Application Guide should minimize the amount of additional effort that is required

DLR Network Elements A DLR network is made up of the following devicesbull Supervisor Node

ndash Active Supervisor Nodendash Back-up Supervisor Node (optional)

bull Ring Node

Each of these device types and how they work in a DLR network are described in the following sections

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

Supervisor Node

A DLR network requires at least one node to be configured as a ring supervisor Currently several Rockwell Automation products support the ring supervisor functionality

Active Ring Supervisor

When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the numerically highest precedence value becomes the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisors

The ring supervisor provides the following primary functionsbull Verifies the integrity of the ringbull Reconfigures the ring to recover from a single fault bull Collects diagnostic information for the ring

Back-up Supervisor Node

At any point in time there will be only one active supervisor on a DLR network However we recommend that at least one other supervisor-capable node be configured to act as a back-up supervisor During normal operation a back-up supervisor behaves like a ring node If the active supervisor node operation is interrupted for example it experiences a power-cycle the back-up supervisor with the next numerically highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor

If multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

We recommend that youbull Configure at least one back-up supervisorbull Configure your desired active ring supervisor with a numerically higher

precedence value as compared to the back-up supervisors

IMPORTANT Out of the box the supervisor-capable devices have their supervisor function disabled so they are ready to participate in either a linearstar network topology or as a ring node on an existing DLR networkIn a DLR network at least one of the supervisor-capable devices must be configured as the ring supervisor before physically closing the ring If not the DLR network will cause significant network issues that can only be resolved by disconnecting the final connection

IMPORTANT While a back-up supervisor is not required on a DLR network it is recommended that at least one back up ring supervisor be configured for the ring network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 11

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP ltFEFF005500740069006c0069006300650020006500730074006100200063006f006e0066006900670075007200610063006900f3006e0020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000640065002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200063006f006e00730065006700750069007200200069006d0070007200650073006900f3006e002000640065002000630061006c006900640061006400200065006e00200069006d0070007200650073006f0072006100730020006400650020006500730063007200690074006f00720069006f00200079002000680065007200720061006d00690065006e00740061007300200064006500200063006f00720072006500630063006900f3006e002e002000530065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006500610064006f007300200063006f006e0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

bull Keep track of your networkrsquos supervisor-precedence values for all supervisor-enabled nodes

For more information about how to configure a supervisor see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

Ring Node

A ring node is any node that operates on the network to process data that is transmitted over the network or to pass on the data to the next node on the network When a fault occurs on the DLR network these reconfigure themselves and relearn the network topology Additionally ring nodes can report fault locations to the active ring supervisor

DLR Network Operation During normal network operation an active ring supervisor uses beacon and other DLR protocol frames to monitor the health of the network Back-up supervisor nodes and ring nodes monitor the beacon frames to track ring transitions between Normal (all links working) and Faulted (the ring is broken in at least one place)

Two beacon-related parameters can be configured

bull Beacon interval - Frequency at which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its ring ports

bull Beacon timeout - Amount of time that supervisor or ring nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action

These parameters impact Network Recovery Performance For information on these performance times see page 58 For information on how to set these parameters see Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network on page 15

IMPORTANT Do not connect non-DLR (single port) devices directly to the DLR network Non-DLR devices should be connected to the network through 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F EtherNetIP taps like the examples shown below

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics Chapter 1

During normal operation one of the active supervisor nodersquos network ports is blocked for DLR protocol frames However the active supervisor node continues to send beacon frames out of both network ports to monitor network health The following graphic shows the use of beacon frames sent from the active ring supervisor

Figure 2 - Normal DLR Network Operation

A second category of ring nodes known as announce frame ring nodes can be designed to participate in a DLR network The active supervisor sends announce frames out one of its ports once per second or on detection of a ring fault DLR networks with announce frame ring nodes have slightly longer recovery times than beacon frame nodes

Number of Nodes on a DLR Network

Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network If your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are segmented into separate but linked DLR networks

With smaller networksbull There is better management of traffic on the networkbull The networks are easier to maintainbull There is a lower likelihood of multiple faultsbull Recovery time is shorter

Additionally on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes network recovery times from faults are higher than those listed in Network Recovery Performance on page 58

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 13

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a007a006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002000700065007200200075006e00610020007300740061006d007000610020006400690020007100750061006c0069007400e00020007300750020007300740061006d00700061006e0074006900200065002000700072006f006f0066006500720020006400650073006b0074006f0070002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000630072006500610074006900200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f0070007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200066006f00720020007500740073006b00720069006600740020006100760020006800f800790020006b00760061006c00690074006500740020007000e500200062006f007200640073006b0072006900760065007200200065006c006c00650072002000700072006f006f006600650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c00650072002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006500720065002egt PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 1 Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics

DLR Network Fault Management

The network may occasionally experience faults that prevent the normal transmission of data between nodes The DLR network can protect your application from interruptions resulting from a single fault To maintain the resiliency of your ring your application should monitor the health of the ring The ring may be faulted while all higher-level network functions such as IO connections are operating normally

Fault location information is available from the active supervisor For more information on how to obtain fault location information see Monitor a DLR Network on page 37

After a fault occurs the active supervisor reconfigures the network to continue sending data on the network

Network Reconfiguration after a Fault

The following graphic shows the network configuration after a failure occurs with the active ring supervisor passing traffic through both of its ports thus maintaining communication on the network

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072006e0065002000740069006c0020006100740020006f007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002000740069006c0020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200065006c006c006500720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072006c00e60073006e0069006e0067002e0020004400650020006f007000720065007400740065006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074006500720020006b0061006e002000e50062006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c006500720020004100630072006f006200610074002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to construct and configure a DLR network

Ethernet Capacity Tool The EtherNetIP Capacity Tool is free software that is intended to help in the initial layout of your EtherNetIP network by calculating resources (Connections Packets per Second) used by a proposed network You choose icons to indicate the type and number of nodes on the network along with associated parameters such as Update Rate desired The tool then calculates the resources used and what is still available This format makes it easy to try different configurationsparameters and see how the outcome is affected

To download the Ethernet Capacity Tool go to httpwwwabcomgoiatools

Topic Page

Ethernet Capacity Tool 15

Install Devices on a DLR Network 16

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration 17

Using the BootPDHCP Server 17

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches 17

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server 19

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network 21

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 21

Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 22

Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 27

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic 29

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network 33

Verify Supervisor Configuration 34

IGMP Snooping 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 15

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Install Devices on a DLR Network

The next step to configure a DLR network is to connect all devices to the network One connection should be left unmade That is temporarily omit the physical connection between two nodes on the ring network because the factory default settings of DLR devices are set to operate in linearstar mode or as ring nodes on existing DLR networks

For more information on installing the EtherNetIP network (cable requirements maximum distance etchellip) refer to the EtherNetIP Media Planning and Installation Manual which can be downloaded here

httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsrmenet-rm002_-en-ppdf

Figure 3 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with One Connection Left Unmade

Use the installation instructions below for each device to connect it to the network Publication Numbers can be downloaded at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliteratureliteraturehtml

IMPORTANT If your DLR network is fully connected without a supervisor configured a network storm may result rendering the network unusable until one link is disconnected and at least one supervisor is enabled

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

ControlLogix EtherNetIP module 1756-IN612 1756-EN2TR

EtherNetIP tap 1783-IN007 1783-ETAP

ArmorStart LT Motor Controller 290-UM001 291E-FAZ-G2

ArmorStart Motor Controller 280G-UM001 280E-F12Z-10A-CR-3

Stratix 6000 Ethernet Switch 1783-IN004 1783-EMS08TA

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

ArmorStart Addressing Configuration

Before using the ArmorStart in an EtherNetIP network an IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address must be configured This section describes how to set up the IP Address of an ArmorStart in three different ways using the BootPDHCP Server the Rotary Network Address Switches and the internal web server

Note When using the AOP it is not configuring the IP Address of the ArmorStart it is just assigning the same IP address that was set-up using the Rotary Network Address Switches or the web page so that communication is established

Using the BootPDHCP Server

The Rockwell Automation BootPDHCP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP software with a user-friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart EtherNetIP adapter must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCPIP network When DHCP is enabled (factory default enabled) the unit will request its network configuration from a BootPDHCP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory The ArmorStart EtherNetIP will remember the last successful address if the DHCP is enabled The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address which would cause the adapter to stop communicating with the ControlLogix controller

Using the Rotary Network Address Switches

The three rotary network address switches can be found on the IO section of the ArmorStart The rotary network address switches are set to 999 and the DHCP is enabled as the factory default The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1hellip254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 1921681_ _ _ [switch setting]

RJ45 ndash RJ45 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585J-M8PBJM-2

RJ45 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBJM-1

M12 ndash M12 Ethernet cable ENET-IN001A 1585D-M4TBDE-2

Description Installation Instructions CatNo

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 17

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO ltFEFF004b00e40079007400e40020006e00e40069007400e4002000610073006500740075006b007300690061002c0020006b0075006e0020006c0075006f0074002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400740065006a00610020006c0061006100640075006b006100730074006100200074007900f6007000f60079007400e400740075006c006f0073007400750073007400610020006a00610020007600650064006f007300740075007300740061002000760061007200740065006e002e00200020004c0075006f0064007500740020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740069007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f0062006100740069006c006c00610020006a0061002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030003a006c006c00610020006a006100200075007500640065006d006d0069006c006c0061002egt SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

To set up the IP Address using the rotary network address switches

1 Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches

2 Set the Network IP address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the IO module using a flat head screwdriver

3 Set up the switches in a range from 001 to 254 In this example they are set to a1 When the switches are set to a valid number the adapterrsquos IP address will be 1921681xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches) In this example the IP address is 1921681163 The adapterrsquos subnet mask will be 2552552550 and the gateway address is set to 0000 A power cycle or a type 1 network reset is required for any new IP address switch setting to take effect

Note The user cannot change the IP address from 1921681xxx when using the IP address switches The top three octets are fixed DHCP or the embedded web server must be used to configure the address to a value different than 1921681xxx Also the adapter will not have a host name assigned or use any Domain name System when using the rotary switch settings

4 If the switches are set to an invalid value (such as 000 or value greater than 254) the adapter will check to see if the DHCP is enabled If so the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server The DHCP server will also assign other Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters If DHCP is not enabled the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in nonvolatile memory

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each EtherNetIP version of ArmorStart The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The internal web server can be used to set up the ArmorStart IP address by performing the following this steps

1 Open your preferred internet web browser

2 Enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example use 1921681163

Note 1921681163 is not the factory default IP address

3 The web server shown below should appear in your web browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 19

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300730061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f50065007300200064006500200066006f0072006d00610020006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200069006d0070007200650073007300f5006500730020006400650020007100750061006c0069006400610064006500200065006d00200069006d00700072006500730073006f0072006100730020006400650073006b0074006f00700020006500200064006900730070006f00730069007400690076006f0073002000640065002000700072006f00760061002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006900610064006f007300200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002000650020006f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650020007600650072007300f50065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

4 Click in the administrative settings folder to expand it and the following is displayed

5 Click in the Network Configuration tab and a prompt to enter a User Name and a Password is displayed Enter the pre-set User Name and Password or if they have not been set up previously use the default User Name The default User Name is Administrator and there is no password set by default

6 After the appropriate User Name and Password is entered the screen below is displayed From this screen the Ethernet Configuration can be changed For example the default IP address shown is changed from 1921681163 to 101010101 After a power cycle the new address must be used to access the web page and the other devices on the network would also require their IP addresses to be reconfigured

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network

After the devices are installed on the DLR network at least one supervisor node must be configured Ring nodes do not require any DLR network configuration

Before a DLR network can be completed (install your devices on the network and make all physical connections) a ring supervisor must be configured and enabled in

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software orbull RSLinx Classic communication software

This section shows how to use RSLogix 5000 programming software beginning on page 22 and RSLinx Classic communication software beginning on page 29 to configure and enable a ring supervisor

Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

To configure the 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps as a ring supervisor use the devicersquos Add-on Profile (AOP) in RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later

For more information regarding the Required Add-On Profile Revision required go to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

IMPORTANT The steps to configure a ring supervisor via software are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module and the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps This example shows how to configure the 1756-EN2TR moduleOnly the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps in the IO Configuration must be configured if you plan to enable the tap as a ring supervisor If the tap will not be used as a ring supervisor we recommend that it is not added to the IO ConfigurationAdditionally to configure a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a supervisor via software or with its DIP switches an IP address must first be assigned The tap does not require an IP address if it is used as a ring node or has its supervisor function enabled by a DIP switchFor more information on how to use a tap switch to configure it as a ring supervisor see Chapter 5 in the EtherNetIP Embedded Switch Technology Manual To download the manual go to httpliteraturerockwellautomationcomidcgroupsliteraturedocumentsapenet-ap005_-en-ppdf

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 21

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200076006f006e002000640065006e0065006e002000530069006500200068006f00630068007700650072007400690067006500200044007200750063006b006500200061007500660020004400650073006b0074006f0070002d0044007200750063006b00650072006e00200075006e0064002000500072006f006f0066002d00470065007200e400740065006e002000650072007a0065007500670065006e0020006d00f60063006800740065006e002e002000450072007300740065006c006c007400650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f00620061007400200075006e0064002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0064006500720020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000

This section will show how to add an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000

1 Open RSLogix 5000

2 Select File gt New to create a new project

3 Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu For this example a 1756-L63 and software revision 20 will be used Then click OK

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP ltFEFF005500740069006c0069006300650020006500730074006100200063006f006e0066006900670075007200610063006900f3006e0020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000640065002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200063006f006e00730065006700750069007200200069006d0070007200650073006900f3006e002000640065002000630061006c006900640061006400200065006e00200069006d0070007200650073006f0072006100730020006400650020006500730063007200690074006f00720069006f00200079002000680065007200720061006d00690065006e00740061007300200064006500200063006f00720072006500630063006900f3006e002e002000530065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006500610064006f007300200063006f006e0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

4 Add the 1756-EN2TR module to your projecta Right-click 1756 Backplane and choose New Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 23

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

b Select the modulec Click Create

5 To add a new module to the tree right-click on Ethernet and select New Module This allows a new ArmorStart to be added to the Logix Project

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200076006f006e002000640065006e0065006e002000530069006500200068006f00630068007700650072007400690067006500200044007200750063006b006500200061007500660020004400650073006b0074006f0070002d0044007200750063006b00650072006e00200075006e0064002000500072006f006f0066002d00470065007200e400740065006e002000650072007a0065007500670065006e0020006d00f60063006800740065006e002e002000450072007300740065006c006c007400650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f00620061007400200075006e0064002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0064006500720020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300730061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f50065007300200064006500200066006f0072006d00610020006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200069006d0070007200650073007300f5006500730020006400650020007100750061006c0069006400610064006500200065006d00200069006d00700072006500730073006f0072006100730020006400650073006b0074006f00700020006500200064006900730070006f00730069007400690076006f0073002000640065002000700072006f00760061002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006900610064006f007300200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002000650020006f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650020007600650072007300f50065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO ltFEFF004b00e40079007400e40020006e00e40069007400e4002000610073006500740075006b007300690061002c0020006b0075006e0020006c0075006f0074002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400740065006a00610020006c0061006100640075006b006100730074006100200074007900f6007000f60079007400e400740075006c006f0073007400750073007400610020006a00610020007600650064006f007300740075007300740061002000760061007200740065006e002e00200020004c0075006f0064007500740020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740069007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f0062006100740069006c006c00610020006a0061002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030003a006c006c00610020006a006100200075007500640065006d006d0069006c006c0061002egt SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

6 Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK

7 Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an Ethernet address For this example the Private Network setting will be used This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the ArmorStart Then press OK

Note Refer to ArmorStart Addressing Configuration on page 17 to set an IP address on the device

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 25

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200076006f006e002000640065006e0065006e002000530069006500200068006f00630068007700650072007400690067006500200044007200750063006b006500200061007500660020004400650073006b0074006f0070002d0044007200750063006b00650072006e00200075006e0064002000500072006f006f0066002d00470065007200e400740065006e002000650072007a0065007500670065006e0020006d00f60063006800740065006e002e002000450072007300740065006c006c007400650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f00620061007400200075006e0064002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0064006500720020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

8 Complete configuration information for the module in your RSLogix 5000 project

The following graphic shows the IO configuration for an example DLR network

9 Download the program to the Logix controller

10 Go online with the controller and leave it in Program mode

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software

After 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps have been added to your RSLogix 5000 programming software project the ring supervisor mode must be enabled

If using RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure the ring supervisor and monitor diagnostics on the DLR network the controller must be online

To enable the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap as a ring supervisor follow these steps

The steps to enable a ring supervisor are basically the same for the 1756-EN2TR module or 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap This example shows how to do it for the 1756-EN2TR module

1 For your project online with the controller double-click on a supervisor-capable device in the IO configuration tree

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 27

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

2 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately you do not need to click Apply or OK

3 Click the Advanced button on the Network tab

4 Configure supervisor-related parameters as shown in the screen shot below

For these parameters you must click Set after entering a value

5 Click Set

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software

A ring supervisor can be configured for the DLR network through RSLinx Classic communication software

For more information regarding the Required RSLinx Classic Communication software Revision required refer to Appendix B

To configure a ring supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software follow these steps

This example is for the 1783-ETAP tap Follow these steps

1 Launch RSLinx Classic Communication Software

2 Browse to the DLR network that is being set up

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID we recommend that the default values be used

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence A supervisor precedence number may be configured for each device that is configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisors the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon interval is the frequency of the active ring supervisor transmitting a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is the amount of time that nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400μS to 500mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 61

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID Reserved for future use 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 29

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072006e0065002000740069006c0020006100740020006f007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002000740069006c0020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200065006c006c006500720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072006c00e60073006e0069006e0067002e0020004400650020006f007000720065007400740065006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074006500720020006b0061006e002000e50062006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c006500720020004100630072006f006200610074002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

If the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file is not installed on the module configured to be the ring supervisor it will appear with a question mark () To obtain and use the EDS file

bull right-click the module and choose to upload the EDS file from the device or

bull download the EDS file from httpwwwrockwellautomationcomrockwellautomationsupportnetworksedspage

3 Access the supervisor-capable nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the nodeb Choose Module Configuration

The General tab appears with information about the module

4 Click the Network tab to Enable Supervisor Mode

Configuration takes effect immediately there is no need to click Apply or OK

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300730061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f50065007300200064006500200066006f0072006d00610020006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200069006d0070007200650073007300f5006500730020006400650020007100750061006c0069006400610064006500200065006d00200069006d00700072006500730073006f0072006100730020006400650073006b0074006f00700020006500200064006900730070006f00730069007400690076006f0073002000640065002000700072006f00760061002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006900610064006f007300200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002000650020006f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650020007600650072007300f50065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

5 Click the Advanced button to configure supervisor-related parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 31

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

IMPORTANT For Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID use the default values

Functionality Description Default Setting

Supervisor Precedence

You may configure a supervisor precedence number for each device configured as a ring supervisor The highest possible supervisor precedence value is 255When multiple nodes are enabled as supervisor the node with the highest precedence value is assigned as the active ring supervisor the other nodes automatically become back-up supervisorsWe recommend that youbull configure at least one back-up supervisor nodebull set the desired Active Ring Supervisor with a relatively high supervisor-

precedence value compared to the back-up node(s)bull keep track of the networkrsquos supervisor-precedence valuesIf multiple supervisors are configured with the same precedence value (the factory default value for all supervisor-capable devices is 0) the node with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the active supervisor

0

Beacon Interval Beacon Interval is the frequency to which the active ring supervisor transmits a beacon frame through both of its Ethernet ports This parameter is user configurable for any time between 200 μS and 100 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance see page 58

400 μS

Beacon Timeout The beacon timeout is amount of time nodes wait before timing out the reception of beacon frames and taking appropriate action Supervisors support a range from 400 μS to 500 mSFor more information on how this parameter relates to network performance seepage 58

1960 μS

Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Reserved for future use 0

Enable IGMP Snooping

For more information on IGMP Snooping see page 35 Enabled

Enable IGMP Querier

For more information on IGMP Querier see page 35 Disabled

Enable Device Port Debugging Mode

For more information on Device Port Debugging Mode see page 59 Disabled

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072006e0065002000740069006c0020006100740020006f007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002000740069006c0020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200065006c006c006500720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072006c00e60073006e0069006e0067002e0020004400650020006f007000720065007400740065006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074006500720020006b0061006e002000e50062006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c006500720020004100630072006f006200610074002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300730061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f50065007300200064006500200066006f0072006d00610020006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200069006d0070007200650073007300f5006500730020006400650020007100750061006c0069006400610064006500200065006d00200069006d00700072006500730073006f0072006100730020006400650073006b0074006f00700020006500200064006900730070006f00730069007400690076006f0073002000640065002000700072006f00760061002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006900610064006f007300200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002000650020006f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650020007600650072007300f50065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

Complete the Physical Connections of the Network

After the ring supervisor nodes are configured and enabled the physical connection of the network must be completed to establish a complete DLR network

The figure below shows an example DLR network with all physical connections complete

Figure 4 - Example Device-level Ring Topology with All Connections Complete

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 33

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f0070007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200066006f00720020007500740073006b00720069006600740020006100760020006800f800790020006b00760061006c00690074006500740020007000e500200062006f007200640073006b0072006900760065007200200065006c006c00650072002000700072006f006f006600650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c00650072002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006500720065002egt PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006f006d002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b006100700061002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006600f600720020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500740073006b0072006900660074006500720020007000e5002000760061006e006c00690067006100200073006b0072006900760061007200650020006f006300680020006600f600720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072002e002000200053006b006100700061006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e00610073002000690020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00630068002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

Verify Supervisor Configuration

The configuration and overall DLR network status can be verified in either RSLogix 5000 programming software or RSLinx Classic communication software

1 Access the supervisor nodersquos properties as shown previously in this chapter

2 Click the Network tab

3 Check the Network Topology and Network Status Fields

For a 1756-EN2TR module or the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F tap the supervisor configuration can also be verified through the modulersquos diagnostic web pages For more information on monitoring diagnostics via an EtherNetIP modulersquos web pages see Monitor a DLR Network starting on page 37

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006f006d002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b006100700061002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006600f600720020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500740073006b0072006900660074006500720020007000e5002000760061006e006c00690067006100200073006b0072006900760061007200650020006f006300680020006600f600720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072002e002000200053006b006100700061006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e00610073002000690020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00630068002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts Chapter 2

IGMP Snooping This functionality is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the network

For snooping to work there must be a device present that is running a querier Typically the device is a router or a switch such as the Stratix 6000 Stratix 8000 or Stratix 8300 managed switch

Once DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

IGMP Querier This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network It determines what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodes

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

IMPORTANT If DHCP for the Armostart is still required the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap must be disabled via the AOP

IMPORTANT If the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issues

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 35

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO ltFEFF004b00e40079007400e40020006e00e40069007400e4002000610073006500740075006b007300690061002c0020006b0075006e0020006c0075006f0074002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400740065006a00610020006c0061006100640075006b006100730074006100200074007900f6007000f60079007400e400740075006c006f0073007400750073007400610020006a00610020007600650064006f007300740075007300740061002000760061007200740065006e002e00200020004c0075006f0064007500740020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740069007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f0062006100740069006c006c00610020006a0061002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030003a006c006c00610020006a006100200075007500640065006d006d0069006c006c0061002egt SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 2 Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts

However for all devices that are configured on the network with the IGMP Querier parameter enabled an IP address other than the factory default value must also be set for those devices If multiple devices on the network enable this functionality only the node with the lowest IP address becomes the active IGMP Querier node

IGMP Version

If the IGMP Querier is enabled a Querier Version must be selected The default version is Version 2

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP ltFEFF005500740069006c0069006300650020006500730074006100200063006f006e0066006900670075007200610063006900f3006e0020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000640065002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200063006f006e00730065006700750069007200200069006d0070007200650073006900f3006e002000640065002000630061006c006900640061006400200065006e00200069006d0070007200650073006f0072006100730020006400650020006500730063007200690074006f00720069006f00200079002000680065007200720061006d00690065006e00740061007300200064006500200063006f00720072006500630063006900f3006e002e002000530065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006500610064006f007300200063006f006e0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3

Monitor a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to monitor the DLR network

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network

Network diagnostic information can be retrieved from the ring supervisor-capable devices using the following

bull RSLogix 5000 programming software status pages

bull RSLinx communication software status pages

bull Device web pages

bull EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate

bull Programmatically through the use of a MSG instruction

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

RSLogix 5000 programming software version 1701 or later must be used and the appropriate AOPs installed to use the softwarersquos profile status pages

RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages

To monitor the network with this method the RSLinx communication software version 255 or later must be used

Topic Page

Methods to Monitor a DLR Network 37

Monitor Status Pages 39

Monitor ArmorStart Internal Web Server 44

Monitor via Faceplate Integration 45

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions 46

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 37

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006f006d002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b006100700061002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006600f600720020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500740073006b0072006900660074006500720020007000e5002000760061006e006c00690067006100200073006b0072006900760061007200650020006f006300680020006600f600720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072002e002000200053006b006100700061006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e00610073002000690020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00630068002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

ArmorStart Internal Web Server

Rockwell Automation provides an internal embedded web server with each ArmorStart EtherNetIP The internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser The ArmorStart EtherNetIP can also be set up from the web server to send e-mail notifications The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data It provides the user with the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having access to RSLogix 5000 Security in the form of an administrative password can be set The default login is Administrator There is no password set by default

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction

For more information on how to monitor the DLR network via MSG Instructions see page 46

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Monitor Status Pages Both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx Classic communication software offer status pages that can be used to monitor the networkrsquos performance

RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages

Monitor the networkrsquos diagnostic information through the RSLogix 5000 programming software when the software is online

To monitor the network in RSLogix 5000 programming software follow these steps

1 Verify that the project is online

2 Access the active supervisor nodersquos propertiesa Right-click the modulersquos entry in the Controller Organizerb Click properties

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 39

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

3 Use the Network tab to monitor diagnostics

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006f006d002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b006100700061002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006600f600720020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500740073006b0072006900660074006500720020007000e5002000760061006e006c00690067006100200073006b0072006900760061007200650020006f006300680020006600f600720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072002e002000200053006b006100700061006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e00610073002000690020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00630068002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

RSLinx Communication Software

To monitor the network in RSLinx communication software follow these steps

1 Click RSWho to browse the network

2 Access the property pages for the active supervisor nodea Open the driver that shows the nodes on the DLR networkb Right-click the node that you want to monitor performancec Click on the choice that you need to access

Multiple choices appear

These options are shown in the following sections

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 41

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Module Configuration

This series of tabs providesbull General informationbull Connection informationbull Module informationbull Internet protocolbull Port configurationbull Network information

The example below shows a ring fault between nodes at IP addresses 10888021 and MAC ID 00-00-BC-02-48-D5

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072006e0065002000740069006c0020006100740020006f007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002000740069006c0020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200065006c006c006500720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072006c00e60073006e0069006e0067002e0020004400650020006f007000720065007400740065006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074006500720020006b0061006e002000e50062006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c006500720020004100630072006f006200610074002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f0070007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200066006f00720020007500740073006b00720069006600740020006100760020006800f800790020006b00760061006c00690074006500740020007000e500200062006f007200640073006b0072006900760065007200200065006c006c00650072002000700072006f006f006600650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c00650072002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006500720065002egt PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300730061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f50065007300200064006500200066006f0072006d00610020006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200069006d0070007200650073007300f5006500730020006400650020007100750061006c0069006400610064006500200065006d00200069006d00700072006500730073006f0072006100730020006400650073006b0074006f00700020006500200064006900730070006f00730069007400690076006f0073002000640065002000700072006f00760061002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006900610064006f007300200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002000650020006f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650020007600650072007300f50065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

There are multiple fields used to monitor network diagnostics

Field Definition

Network Topology Possible values here can be Linear or Ring

Network Status Displays if the network is operating normally (Normal) or has experienced a fault (Ring Fault) as shown in the previous example screen

Active Ring Supervisor Displays the IP address or MAC address of the active ring supervisor

Active Supervisor Precedence For more information on this field see Active Ring Supervisor on page 11

Enable Ring Supervisor Configurable field that lets you to set the node as a ring supervisor

Ring Faults Detected Number of faults detected on the network since the last module power cycle or counter reset

Supervisor Status Displays whether this node is the active ring supervisor (Active) a back-up supervisor (Back-up) a ring node or part of a linear network

Last Active Node on Port 1 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 1 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Last Active Node on Port 2 The last node the active ring supervisor can communicate with on Port 2 This value is an IP address or a MAC ID and remains latched until the Verify Fault Location button is clicked

Status Displays whether a fault exists on the ring

IMPORTANT If the Network Topology field = Ring and the Network Status field = Normal the Last Active Node fields will display the last fault information even though it has been correctedTo clear the last fault information from these fields click Verify Fault Location You may see a message informing you that the supervisor is no longer in fault mode and the fields will be cleared

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 43

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200076006f006e002000640065006e0065006e002000530069006500200068006f00630068007700650072007400690067006500200044007200750063006b006500200061007500660020004400650073006b0074006f0070002d0044007200750063006b00650072006e00200075006e0064002000500072006f006f0066002d00470065007200e400740065006e002000650072007a0065007500670065006e0020006d00f60063006800740065006e002e002000450072007300740065006c006c007400650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f00620061007400200075006e0064002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0064006500720020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server

Open your preferred internet web browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart For this example 192168122 will be used

Use the links on the left-most navigation bar to see each available web page The screen below shows Ring Statistics for the ArmorStart 280E

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview

The EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) network diagnostics faceplate provides basic DLR network status information to the user to assist with monitoring and troubleshooting a DLR network

The diagnostics faceplate contains two major components

bull Logic code (encapsulated in an Add-On Instruction) that allows the controller to retrieve real-time DLR network status information

bull HMI faceplate graphics to allow the data to be visualized on an operator interface

The DLR diagnostics faceplate application can be downloaded from the Rockwell Automation Sample Code website at httpsamplecoderockwellautomationcom

Besides the individual Logix and View project components a demo application is also included with the downloaded file

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 45

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions

Network diagnostic information can also be obtained programmatically via MSG instructions in RSLogix 5000 programming software For example you can

bull Get all ring diagnostic informationbull Get a ring participant listbull Get the active supervisorbull Clear rapid ring faultsbull Verify a fault locationbull Reset a fault counterbull Enable and configure a ring supervisor

This information can be displayed on an HMI device or manipulated in the project code

Figure 5 - Example Use of MSG Instruction

This example describes how to retrieve diagnostic information from the DLR network Follow these steps

1 Enter a MSG instruction into the rung of logic

2 Configure the MSG instruction to retrieve ring diagnostic information service as shown in the following screen shots

IMPORTANT Make sure the tag created is sized appropriately to hold all of the data that you are reading or writing For more information see page 48

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a007a006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002000700065007200200075006e00610020007300740061006d007000610020006400690020007100750061006c0069007400e00020007300750020007300740061006d00700061006e0074006900200065002000700072006f006f0066006500720020006400650073006b0074006f0070002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000630072006500610074006900200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO ltFEFF004b00e40079007400e40020006e00e40069007400e4002000610073006500740075006b007300690061002c0020006b0075006e0020006c0075006f0074002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400740065006a00610020006c0061006100640075006b006100730074006100200074007900f6007000f60079007400e400740075006c006f0073007400750073007400610020006a00610020007600650064006f007300740075007300740061002000760061007200740065006e002e00200020004c0075006f0064007500740020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740069007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f0062006100740069006c006c00610020006a0061002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030003a006c006c00610020006a006100200075007500640065006d006d0069006c006c0061002egt SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

3 Configure the MSG instructionrsquos communication path to point to the active supervisor node

The path on the following screen is one example path

IMPORTANT When using the Custom Get_Attributes_All (01) service pointing to an active supervisor node will retrieve all of the attributes listed in Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description on page 50Pointing to a non-supervisor node will retrieve only the Network Topology and Network Status attribute informationPointing to backup supervisor node will retrieve the current active supervisorrsquos IP address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 47

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab

Use the values on the Configuration tab of your MSG instruction to perform specific services Sample DLR network diagnostic application code for example Add-on Instruction or HMI faceplate graphics is available on the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library For more information about the Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library see httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsolutionsintegratedarchitectureresources5html

➊ This request only works if there are fewer than 40 nodes on the network If there are more nodes than will fit in a single message an error will be returned➋ Use a Destination Length of 54 bytes if using firmware revision 3x or later for the 1756-EN2TR module or firmware revision 2x or later for the 1783-ETAP

1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

Request Description Message Type

Service Type

Service Code (HEX)

Class (HEX)

Instance Attribute (HEX)

Source Element

Source Length (Bytes)

Destination Destination Length (bytes)

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

Information for this request is listed in Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information on page 49

CIP Generic Custom 1 47 1 NA LeftBlank

0 Tag 50or54 ➋

Request Ring Participant List ➊

Information for this request is listed in Request the Ring Participant List on page 51

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 9 NA NA Tag 10node

Get Active Supervisor

Obtain the IP address and MAC ID of the active supervisor on the DLR network

CIP Generic Get Attribute Single

e 47 1 a NA NA Tag 10

Acknowledge Rapid Ring Faults Condition

Request supervisor to resume normal operation after encountering a rapid ring fault condition

CIP Generic Custom 4c 47 1 NA NA NA NA

Verify a Fault Location

Request supervisor to update Last Active Node values

CIP Generic 4b 47 1 NA NA NA NA NA

Reset the Ring Fault Counter

Reset the number of ring faults detected on the DLR network

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 5 Tag 2 NA NA

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

Information for this request is listed in Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor on page 52

CIP Generic Set Attribute Single

10 47 1 4 Tag 12 NA NA

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP ltFEFF005500740069006c0069006300650020006500730074006100200063006f006e0066006900670075007200610063006900f3006e0020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000640065002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200063006f006e00730065006700750069007200200069006d0070007200650073006900f3006e002000640065002000630061006c006900640061006400200065006e00200069006d0070007200650073006f0072006100730020006400650020006500730063007200690074006f00720069006f00200079002000680065007200720061006d00690065006e00740061007300200064006500200063006f00720072006500630063006900f3006e002e002000530065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006500610064006f007300200063006f006e0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information

By performing the Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information request on an active supervisor the MSG instruction returns the following information

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

SINT [0] Network Topology Current network topology mode 0 = Linear

1 = Ring

SINT [1] Network Status Current status of the network 0 = Normal

1 = Ring Fault

2 = Unexpected Loop Detected

3 = Partial Network Fault

4 = Rapid FaultRestore Cycle

SINT [2] Ring Supervisor Status Ring supervisor active status flag 0 = Node is functioning as a backup

1 = Node is functioning as the active ring supervisor

2 = Node is functioning as a normal ring node

3 = Node is operating in a non-DLR topology

4 = Node cannot support the currently operating ring parameters thatis Beacon Interval andor Beacon Timeout

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [3] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)

1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [4] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊ Valid value range = 0hellip255

0 = Default value

SINT [5-8] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 ms

Default = 400 μs

SINT [9-12] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout Value value range = 400 μshellip500 ms

Default value = 1960 μs

SINT [13-14] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages Valid value range = 0hellip4094

Default value = 0

SINT [15-16] Ring Faults Count Number of ring faults since power up ➊

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 49

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072006e0065002000740069006c0020006100740020006f007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002000740069006c0020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200065006c006c006500720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072006c00e60073006e0069006e0067002e0020004400650020006f007000720065007400740065006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074006500720020006b0061006e002000e50062006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c006500720020004100630072006f006200610074002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300730061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f50065007300200064006500200066006f0072006d00610020006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200069006d0070007200650073007300f5006500730020006400650020007100750061006c0069006400610064006500200065006d00200069006d00700072006500730073006f0072006100730020006400650073006b0074006f00700020006500200064006900730070006f00730069007400690076006f0073002000640065002000700072006f00760061002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006900610064006f007300200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002000650020006f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650020007600650072007300f50065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description

➊ This destination tag is available only with the 1756-EN2TR module firmware revision 3x or later 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps firmware revisions 2x or later If using the 1783-ETAP tap firmware revision 1x your program does not include this destination tag

➋ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Last Active Node on Port 1 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 1 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [17-20] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [21-26] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Last Active Node on Port 2 Last active node at the end of the chain through port 2 of the active ring supervisor during a ring fault

SINT [27-30] Device IP address ➋ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [31-36] Device MAC address ➋ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [37-38] Ring Protocol Participants Count

Number of devices in the ring protocol participants list

Active Supervisor Address IP andor Ethernet MAC address of the active ring supervisor

SINT [39-42] Supervisor IP address Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [43-48] Supervisor MAC address Any valid Ethernet MAC address

SINT [49] Active Supervisor Precedence

Precedence value of the active ring supervisor

SINT [50-53]➊ Capability Flags Alerts you that the device is capable of operating as a supervisor and beacon-based ring node

0x22

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Monitor a DLR Network Chapter 3

Request the Ring Participant List

When requesting the Ring Participant List service on the DLR network the MSG instruction returns the following information

Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description

➊ This attribute will return an array of the data shown one entry for each node The Ring Protocol Participants Count attribute determines the number entries

➋ This tag displays only IP addresses for ring participants that have been configured with one For example you may have a 1783-ETAP tap connected to the network that has not been assigned an IP address In that case no address is shown for the 1783-ETAP tap

➌ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

➍ Unlike destination tag SINT [0-3] where IP addresses are displayed only for ring participants configured with an IP address this tag displays MAC addresses for all ring participants because every ring participant has a MAC address

Destination Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Protocol Participants List ➊

List of devices participating in ring protocol

SINT [0-3] Device IP address ➋➌ Any valid IP address value

A value = 0 indicates no IP address has been configured for the device

SINT [4-9] Device MAC address ➌➍ Any valid Ethernet MAC address

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 51

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072006e0065002000740069006c0020006100740020006f007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002000740069006c0020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200065006c006c006500720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072006c00e60073006e0069006e0067002e0020004400650020006f007000720065007400740065006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074006500720020006b0061006e002000e50062006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c006500720020004100630072006f006200610074002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f0070007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200066006f00720020007500740073006b00720069006600740020006100760020006800f800790020006b00760061006c00690074006500740020007000e500200062006f007200640073006b0072006900760065007200200065006c006c00650072002000700072006f006f006600650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c00650072002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006500720065002egt PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006f006d002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b006100700061002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006600f600720020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500740073006b0072006900660074006500720020007000e5002000760061006e006c00690067006100200073006b0072006900760061007200650020006f006300680020006600f600720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072002e002000200053006b006100700061006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e00610073002000690020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00630068002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 3 Monitor a DLR Network

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor

When performing the Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor request on a supervisor-capable device configure the MSG instruction with the following information

Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description

➊ RSLogix 5000 programming software may display the value in this field as negative numbers To better understand the value we recommend you view it in HEX format

Source Tag Attribute Name Description Possible Values

Ring Supervisor Config Ring Supervisor configuration parameters

SINT [0] Ring Supervisor Enable Ring supervisor enable flag 0 = Node is configured as a normal ring node (default configuration)1 = Node is configured as a ring supervisor

SINT [1] Ring Supervisor Precedence Precedence value of a ring supervisor ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip2550 = Default value

SINT [2-5] Beacon Interval Duration of ring beacon interval

Valid value range = 200 μshellip100 000 μsDefault = 400 μs

SINT [6-9] Beacon Timeout Duration of ring beacon timeout ➊

Value value range = 400 μshellip500 000 μsDefault value = 1960 μs

SINT [10-11] DLR VLAN ID Valid ID to use in ring protocol messages ➊

Valid value range = 0hellip4094Default value = 0

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 4

Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Introduction Use this chapter to learn how to troubleshoot the DLR network

General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks

Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears

bull For a DLR networkndash Verify that at least one node has been configured as a supervisor

on the network and that Network Topology = Ringndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected

to each devicendash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned

correctlyndash Check the Network Status field on the active supervisor nodersquos status

page to determine the fault typebull For a linear network

ndash Verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = LinearIf any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network

ndash Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device

ndash Verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network

Topic Page

General Solutions for the Linear or DLR Networks 53

Duplicate IP Address Detection 54

Specific Issues on the DLR Network 55

Network Recovery Performance 58

Device Port Debugging Mode 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 53

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP ltFEFF005500740069006c0069006300650020006500730074006100200063006f006e0066006900670075007200610063006900f3006e0020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000640065002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200063006f006e00730065006700750069007200200069006d0070007200650073006900f3006e002000640065002000630061006c006900640061006400200065006e00200069006d0070007200650073006f0072006100730020006400650020006500730063007200690074006f00720069006f00200079002000680065007200720061006d00690065006e00740061007300200064006500200063006f00720072006500630063006900f3006e002e002000530065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006500610064006f007300200063006f006e0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f0070007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200066006f00720020007500740073006b00720069006600740020006100760020006800f800790020006b00760061006c00690074006500740020007000e500200062006f007200640073006b0072006900760065007200200065006c006c00650072002000700072006f006f006600650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c00650072002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006500720065002egt PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Duplicate IP Address Detection

Some EtherNetIP communication modules support duplicate IP address detection The module verifies that its IP address does not match any other network devicersquos IP address when performing either of these tasks

bull Connect the module to an EtherNetIP network

bull Change the modulersquos IP address

If the modulersquos IP address matches that of another device on the network the modulersquos EtherNetIP port transitions to Conflict mode In Conflict mode these conditions exist

bull OK status indicator is blinking red

bull Network (NET) status indicator is solid red

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the module status display indicates the conflict

The display scrollsOK ltIP_address_of_this_modulegt Duplicate IP

ltMac_address_of_duplicate_node_detectedgt

For example OK 108860196 Duplicate IP - 0000BC0234B4

bull On some EtherNetIP communication modules the modulersquos diagnostic webpage displays information about duplicate IP address detection

For more information on which EtherNetIP communication modules support displaying duplicate IP address on their diagnostic webpage see the Technical Note titled Logix modules Duplicate IP address detection enhancement 118216 in the Technical Support Knowledgebase available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Specific Issues on the DLR Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on the DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described on the previous page

Issue Description Solution

Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault A link on the DLR network may be brokenbull intentionally for example because of adding or deleting nodes but not making all

physical connections to restore the setup of the network withwithout the nodebull unintentionally for example because a cable is broken or a device malfunctionsWhen this fault occurs the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring FaultThe screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes The faulted node is between nodes 108880115 and 108880208 If the IP address of either node is not available the software will display the nodersquos MAC ID

Once the fault is corrected the ring is automatically restored and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itClick the Refresh Communication link as needed to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition existsFinally DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 55

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200076006f006e002000640065006e0065006e002000530069006500200068006f00630068007700650072007400690067006500200044007200750063006b006500200061007500660020004400650073006b0074006f0070002d0044007200750063006b00650072006e00200075006e0064002000500072006f006f0066002d00470065007200e400740065006e002000650072007a0065007500670065006e0020006d00f60063006800740065006e002e002000450072007300740065006c006c007400650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f00620061007400200075006e0064002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0064006500720020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Issue Description Solution

Rapid Ring Fault When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs the following events occurbull The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2 resulting in possible network

segmentation that is some nodes may become unreachablebull The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is offbull As soon as the fault occurs for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and

RSLinx communication software the Status field = Rapid FaultRestore Cycles

Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Faultbull 5 intentional disconnectionsreconnections of a node from the network within 30

secondsbull A duplex mismatch between two connected devicesbull Electromagnetic noise on the networkbull Unstable physical connections such as intermittent connectorsGiven the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a Rapid Ring Fault condition is present

Multiple possible solutions existbull For the disconnections and reconnections issue no

solution is requiredClear the fault after reconnecting the device to the network permanentlybull For the duplex mismatch issue reconfigure the duplex

parameters to make sure they match between the devices

bull For the electromagnetic noise issue determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

bull For the unstable connections issue determine where they exist on the network and correct them

bull Check the media counters for all devices on the network The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid Ring Fault

bull Remove devices from the network one by one If the Rapid Ring Fault disappears after a device is removed that device is causing the fault

bull DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality on the 1783-ETAP tap may be used to analyze a suspicious node

For more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59bull Finally the Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration

may not be appropriate for the networkHowever if these values need to be changed we recommend that you contact Rockwell Automation technical supportOnce the fault is fixed click Clear Fault

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN ltFEFF9ad854c18cea51fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e30593002537052376642306e753b8cea3092670059279650306b4fdd306430533068304c3067304d307e3059300230c730b930af30c830c330d730d730ea30f330bf3067306e53705237307e305f306f30d730eb30fc30d57528306b9069305730663044307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e30593002gt KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Issue Description Solution

Partial Fault Condition A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for example a component failureThe active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab When a partial fault is detected the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port At this point the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC IDs for each node displayedWhen this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault ConditionOnce the fault is corrected it automatically clears and the Network Status field returns to Normal

Determine where the fault condition exists and correct itAdditionally the DevicePort Debugging Mode functionality also known as Port Mirroring on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap may be used to analyze a suspicious nodeFor more information refer to Device Port Debugging Mode on page 59

Media Counter Errors or Collisions

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error For example an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field

On a DLR network it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors For example if the network breaks a low level of media counter errors appears With a low level of media counter errors the value typically does not continuously increase and often clearsA high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear For example there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes a high level of media counter errors appears steadily increasing and not clearingTo access the RSLinx screen above browse the network right-click on the device select Module Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab

Some example solutions includebull Check for a mismatch of speed andor duplex between

two linked nodesbull Verify that all cables on the network are securely

connected to each devicebull Check for electromagnetic noise on the network If you

find it eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 57

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Network Recovery Performance

When measuring the networkrsquos performance with regard to dealing with fault conditions consider the network recovery time Network recovery is the time for all of the following to take place

1 The supervisor node recognizes that a fault exists on the network

2 The supervisor node reconfigures the network because of the fault

3 The supervisor node communicates to the network nodes that a fault condition exists

4 The network nodes reconfigure themselves because of the fault

With the default beacon interval value of 400 mS and beacon timeout value of 1960 mS the worst-case time for network recovery times are

bull 2890 mS for a copper DLR network This recovery time is based on 100 m copper segments between nodes on the network

bull 3140 mS for a fiber-optic DLR network This recovery time is based on 2 kM fiber-optic cable segments between nodes on the network

When considering the values listed above keep in mind

bull Recovery time may actually occur faster than the times listed

bull The recovery times listed above assume that your networkrsquos nodes are operating at 100 Mbps speed and full-duplex mode We recommend that your nodes generally operate in this mode for DLR networks

bull If other node conditions exist such as a node operating at 10 Mbps full-duplex or 10100 Mbps half-duplex the recovery times will vary from the times listed above

If this is the case for your application the beacon interval and beacon timeout will need to be changed We recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support if these parameters need to be changed

bull The value assumes that the majority of the traffic on your network is EtherNetIP traffic

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Troubleshoot a DLR Network Chapter 4

Device Port Debugging Mode

This functionality is disabled by default Device Port Debugging mode which is similar to port mirroring can be used to monitor data received on the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos two network ports Monitor the data over the device port to a device such as a personal computer running a protocol analyzer application for advanced network debugging or analysis

When device port debugging is used on a 1783-ETAP the device connected to the 1783-ETAP taprsquos front port receives all of the data traversing the ring (both directions)

Device Port Debugging Example Network

When using the Device Port Debugging mode functionality insert the 1783-ETAP with the network analyzer connected to the device port It is inserted at the spot on the ring network where the node in question is located The graphic below shows a 1783-ETAP tap inserted in the network

IMPORTANT This functionality should be used only when troubleshooting the network and not in normal network operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 59

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Chapter 4 Troubleshoot a DLR Network

Combined total network bandwidth of the traffic received on the two 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taprsquos ports connected to the network should not exceed the taprsquos device port capacity The speed setting determines the device portrsquos capacity

Configure the device port on a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap to either of two speed settings

bull 100 Mbps - default settingbull 10 Mbps

If the bandwidth exceeds the capacity of the taprsquos device port some frames from the ring will be dropped before reaching the device port These dropped frames do not impact the traffic on the rest of the DLR network

The device port setting determines how much network traffic the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap can handle before dropping frames The circled section in the graphic below shows the Port Buffer Utilization of the Device Port In this example the value is zero because a ring fault exists on the network

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP ltFEFF005500740069006c0069006300650020006500730074006100200063006f006e0066006900670075007200610063006900f3006e0020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000640065002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020007000610072006100200063006f006e00730065006700750069007200200069006d0070007200650073006900f3006e002000640065002000630061006c006900640061006400200065006e00200069006d0070007200650073006f0072006100730020006400650020006500730063007200690074006f00720069006f00200079002000680065007200720061006d00690065006e00740061007300200064006500200063006f00720072006500630063006900f3006e002e002000530065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000630072006500610064006f007300200063006f006e0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Appendix A

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Consider the following guidelines and recommendations when using a DLR or linear network

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Use fewer than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkIf your application requires more than 50 nodes we recommend that the nodes are broken into separate but linked DLR networks

If you use more than 50 nodes on a single DLR networkbull Your network has a greater chance of multiple faults

occurring on the networkbull Network recovery times from faulted DLR network

are higher

Do not configure a supervisor on a linear network If your linear network includes non-DLR nodes and has a supervisor-enabled node on the network it may impact communication to non-DLR devices connected to the linear network

If you must connect a device that is running at 10 Mbps to a DLR or linear network do so through a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap device port

The 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps can operate at 100 Mbps on the DLR network this is the optimal speed for a network If you connect a 10 Mbps device directly to the network instead of through a tap the linear or DLR network traffic slows to 10 MbpsAdditionally if the 10 Mbps device is connected to the network without a 1783-ETAP tap network recovery times are significantly impacted

Configure multiple supervisor nodes per ring If your DLR network only has one supervisor and the supervisor experiences a fault none of the other nodes become the active supervisor In this case the network becomes a linear network until the fault is corrected and the DLR network restoredAnother reason to configure multiple supervisor nodes is for replacing an active supervisor node with an out-of-box replacement the new device will not be enabled as a supervisor (by default) and there would still be no supervisor on the network

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 61

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Connect switches to a DLR network via 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps

If switches are connected to the DLR network without the use of a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap the network may experience unpredictable behavior and network performance is unknown

Run all nodes on the DLR network at 100 Mbps and in Full-Duplex mode

These configuration values provide the best performance for your networkAdditionally we recommend that youbull Use auto-negotiate for all nodes on the DLR networkbull Do not use auto-negotiate on one node and then force

speed on the next node linked to it

In a linear network the number of nodes to use is application specific based on the considerations described in the next box

When determining the number of nodes to use on a linear network consider the followingbull There is a delay per node as information is transmitted

to each successive node used on the networkndash The typical delay on a linear network with 100 m

copper segments between nodes is 30 mSndash The typical delay on a linear network with 2 kM

fiber-optic segments between nodes is 40 mS

The greater the number of nodes on the network the longer the total time for information to be transmitted across the entire networkbull The single point of failure possibility is greater with

each additional connectionbull Troubleshooting the network may be more difficult

with a higher number of nodes

The total time for information to be transmitted across the entire network and its effect on how many nodes to use on a linear network is related to the Requested Packet Interval (RPI)Verify that the total time to transmit information from the first node to the last node on the network is less than the RPI Make sure the network is not loaded beyond 90 of capacity

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations Appendix A

GuidelineRecommendation Explanation

Do not physically close a DLR network without a supervisor configured on the network

A DLR network without a supervisor node results in a network stormIf you do close the DLR network without a supervisor configured break the ring and configure at least one supervisor before physically reconnecting the network

Use the default values for the followingbull Beacon Intervalbull Beacon Timeoutbull Ring Protocol VLAN ID

Changing the default values for the parameters Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout and Ring Protocol VLAN ID can result in unpredictable network behavior and negatively impacted network performanceThe default values are optimized for a network withbull 50 or fewer nodes are on the networkbull All nodes are operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex

modebull At least 50 of the network traffic bandwidth being

EtherNetIP trafficIf you think the values of the Beacon Interval Beacon Timeout or Ring Protocol VLAN ID need to be changed for example if any node on ring is not operating at 100 Mbps and full-duplex mode we recommend that you first contact Rockwell Automation technical support

If DHCP for the ArmorStarts is still required you will need to disable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the E-tap via the AOP

IGMP Snooping is enabled by default in the 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F and 1783-ETAP2F taps and is commonly used to manage multicast traffic on the network When in use this functionality allows the tap to multicast data to only those devices that need the data rather than to all devices connected to the networkOnce DHCP is enabled the switch could change the IP addresses on the ArmorStarts depending on network demand which could cause RSlogix5000 to loose communication with the device as connectivity is established via the AOP in the initial configuration

The IGMP Querier functionality should be enabled for at least one node on the network

This functionality is disabled by default The IGMP Querier functionality enables a 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F tap or switch such as a Stratix managed switch to send out a query to all devices on the network to determine what multicast addresses are of interest to a specific node or a group of nodesIf the IGMP Querier functionality is not enabled for at least one node on the network multicast traffic on the network may eventually create network performance issuesThe 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP1F or 1783-ETAP2F taps managed switches and routers are examples of devices that support IGMP Querier functionality

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 63

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Appendix A Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations

Notes

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006f006d002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b006100700061002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006600f600720020006b00760061006c00690074006500740073007500740073006b0072006900660074006500720020007000e5002000760061006e006c00690067006100200073006b0072006900760061007200650020006f006300680020006600f600720020006b006f007200720065006b007400750072002e002000200053006b006100700061006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e00610073002000690020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00630068002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Appendix B

Required Firmware Revisions

Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software tcan be used o upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later2x or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in the RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which RSLinx software version is required for each firmware revision see page 66

For both the 1756-EN2TR module and 1783-ETAP tap make sure that the Major Revision configured on the General tab of the devicersquos RSLogix 5000 programming software configuration matches the major revision of the physical module

IMPORTANT To download an AOP go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcomcontrolflashLogixProfileraspDepending on the firmware revision of your product a specific AOP version must be used

Firmware Revision Add-On Profile Revision Cat No

21 ➊ 1x or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 2x or later

11 ➋ 1x or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 2x or later

2x or later 2x or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012 65

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Appendix B Required Firmware Revisions

If the device configuration on the General tab does not match the physical module the programming software alerts you to this mismatch when attempting to configure the Internet Protocol Port Configuration and Network tabs for that device

Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software

➊ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1756-EN2TR module from firmware revision 21 to 3x or later1x or later3x or later255 or later3x or later256 or later

➋ The ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade software can be used to upgrade a 1783-ETAP tap from firmware revision 11 to 2x or later

To download new firmware go to httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasindex_enhtml

If the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required RSLinx communication software listed above must be used for that revision For example if the 1756-EN2TR module is upgraded to firmware revision 3x or later AOP revision 2x or later must be used in your RSLogix 5000 programming software

Additionally if the firmware revision is upgraded on the module or tap the required AOP revision must also be used for that firmware revision For more information on which AOP revision is required for each firmware revision see page 65

IMPORTANT Depending on the firmware revision of your product specific versions of RSLinx communication software must be used

Firmware Revision Required RSLinx Communication Software Version

Cat No

21 ➊ 255 or later 1756-EN2TR

3x or later 256 or later

11 ➋ 255 or later 1783-ETAP

2x or later 256 or later

2x or later 256 or later 1783-ETAP1F

1783-ETAP2F

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA ltFEFF005500740069006c006900730065007a00200063006500730020006f007000740069006f006e00730020006100660069006e00200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000410064006f00620065002000500044004600200070006f007500720020006400650073002000e90070007200650075007600650073002000650074002000640065007300200069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e00730020006400650020006800610075007400650020007100750061006c0069007400e90020007300750072002000640065007300200069006d007000720069006d0061006e0074006500730020006400650020006200750072006500610075002e0020004c0065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740073002000500044004600200063007200e900e90073002000700065007500760065006e0074002000ea0074007200650020006f007500760065007200740073002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000610069006e00730069002000710075002700410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000650074002000760065007200730069006f006e007300200075006c007400e90072006900650075007200650073002egt ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret AŞ Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat6 34752 İccedilerenkoumly İstanbul Tel +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-AT001A-EN-P ndash November 2012 68 Copyright copy 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make thebest use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnectSM support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupport

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manualYou can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures

Documentation Feedback

Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA-DU002 available at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

United States or Canada 14406463434

Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomsupportamericasphone_enhtml or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process

Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure

  • Important User Information
  • General Precautions
  • Software Requirements
  • Additional Resources
  • Rockwell Automation Support
  • Installation Assistance
  • New Product Satisfaction Return
  • Table of Contents
  • Chapter 1
    • Device-Level Ring (DLR) Basics
      • Introduction
      • ArmorStart with EtherNetIP Overview
      • What is a Device-level Ring (DLR) Network
      • DLR Network Elements
        • Supervisor Node
        • Ring Node
          • DLR Network Operation
          • Number of Nodes on a DLR Network
          • DLR Network Fault Management
            • Network Reconfiguration after a Fault
              • Chapter 2
                • Construct and Configure a Device-level Ring Network with ArmorStarts
                  • Introduction
                  • Ethernet Capacity Tool
                  • Install Devices on a DLR Network
                  • ArmorStart Addressing Configuration
                    • Using the BootPDHCP Server
                    • Using the Rotary Network Address Switches
                    • Using the ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                      • Configure Supervisor Nodes on a DLR Network
                        • Configure a Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Adding an Armorstart to RSLogix 5000
                        • Enable Ring Supervisor in RSLogix 5000 Programming Software
                        • Configure and Enable a Ring Supervisor in RSLinx Classic Communication Software
                          • Complete the Physical Connections of the Network
                          • Verify Supervisor Configuration
                          • IGMP Snooping
                          • IGMP Querier
                              • Chapter 3
                                • Monitor a DLR Network
                                  • Introduction
                                  • Methods to Monitor a DLR Network
                                    • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                    • RSLinx Communication Software Status Pages
                                    • ArmorStart Internal Web Server
                                    • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate
                                    • Programmatically Through the Use of a MSG Instruction
                                      • Monitor Status Pages
                                        • RSLogix 5000 Programming Software Status Pages
                                        • RSLinx Communication Software
                                          • How to Access the ArmorStart EtherNetIP Internal Web Server
                                            • EtherNetIP Device Level Ring (DLR) Network Diagnostics Faceplate Overview
                                              • Monitor Diagnostics via MSG Instructions
                                                • Use Specific Values on the Configuration Tab
                                                • Retrieve All Ring Diagnostic Information
                                                • Retrieve All Diagnostic Information Attribute Description
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List
                                                • Request the Ring Participant List Attribute Description
                                                  • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor
                                                    • Enable and Configure a Ring Supervisor Attribute Description
                                                      • Chapter 4
                                                        • Troubleshoot a DLR Network
                                                          • Introduction
                                                          • General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks
                                                          • Duplicate IP Address Detection
                                                          • Specific Issues on the DLR Network
                                                          • Network Recovery Performance
                                                          • Device Port Debugging Mode
                                                            • Device Port Debugging Example Network
                                                              • Appendix A
                                                                • Network Usage Guidelines and Recommendations
                                                                  • Notes
                                                                      • Appendix B
                                                                        • Required Firmware Revisions
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for an Add-On Profile
                                                                          • Required Firmware Revision for RSLinx Communication Software
                                                                            • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles true AutoRotatePages All Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (US Web Coated 050SWOP051 v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket false DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 1 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo true PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo false PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Remove UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile () AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 300 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Average ColorImageResolution 300 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 300 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Average GrayImageResolution 300 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 200000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 1200 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Average MonoImageResolution 1200 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 150000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects false CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName () PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false Description ltlt CHS ltFEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000500044004600206587686353ef901a8fc7684c976262535370673a548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200208fdb884c9ad88d2891cf62535370300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002gt CHT ltFEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef653ef5728684c9762537088686a5f548c002000700072006f006f00660065007200204e0a73725f979ad854c18cea7684521753706548679c300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002gt DAN 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 DEU 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 ESP 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 FRA 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 ITA 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 JPN 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 KOR ltFEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020b370c2a4d06cd0d10020d504b9b0d1300020bc0f0020ad50c815ae30c5d0c11c0020ace0d488c9c8b85c0020c778c1c4d560002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002egt NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken voor kwaliteitsafdrukken op desktopprinters en proofers De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 50 en hoger) NOR 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 PTB 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 SUO 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 SVE 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 ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents for quality printing on desktop printers and proofers Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 50 and later) gtgt Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (10) ] OtherNamespaces [ ltlt AsReaderSpreads false CropImagesToFrames true ErrorControl WarnAndContinue FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false IncludeGuidesGrids false IncludeNonPrinting false IncludeSlug false Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (40) ] OmitPlacedBitmaps false OmitPlacedEPS false OmitPlacedPDF false SimulateOverprint Legacy gtgt ltlt AddBleedMarks false AddColorBars false AddCropMarks false AddPageInfo false AddRegMarks false ConvertColors NoConversion DestinationProfileName () DestinationProfileSelector NA Downsample16BitImages true FlattenerPreset ltlt PresetSelector MediumResolution gtgt FormElements false GenerateStructure true IncludeBookmarks false IncludeHyperlinks false IncludeInteractive false IncludeLayers false IncludeProfiles true MultimediaHandling UseObjectSettings Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (20) ] PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector NA PreserveEditing true UntaggedCMYKHandling LeaveUntagged UntaggedRGBHandling LeaveUntagged UseDocumentBleed false gtgt ]gtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2400 2400] PageSize [612000 792000]gtgt setpagedevice